CX410 Series
User's Guide
October 2012
Machine type(s):
7527
Model(s):
415, 436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray......................................................................................................45
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray..............................................................................................................49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................207
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................210
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................236
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]..............................................................................................242
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]........................................................................249
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]......................................................................................................250
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]...........................................................................................252
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx].................................................................................252
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety information
7
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety information
8
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
User'sGuideandQuick Reference Guide—Theguidesmay
be available on the Software and Documentation CD.
For more information, visit
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Instructions for:
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From
the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Help using the printer software
WindowsorMac Help—Openaprintersoftware program
or application, and then click Help.
?
Click
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
10
What are you looking for?
Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
Lexmark Support Web site—
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information
Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
11
1
2
3
4
5
Right side 305 mm (12 in.)
Front 508 mm (20 in.)
Left side 76 mm (3 in.)
Rear
Top
101.6 mm (4 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
12
Basic models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Printer control panel
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Standard bin
Top door latch
Right side cover
Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
Manual feeder
Optional 650-sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
• Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
13
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including two-
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
sided (duplex) pages.
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
• Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents from 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches) dimension.
• Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) thick.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer control panel
14
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
Use the
To
• View the printer status and messages.
1
Display
• Set up and operate the printer.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Home button
Help button
Go to the home screen.
Go to the Help menus.
Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.
Keypad
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Cancel all printer activity.
Sleep button
Cancel button
Start button
Indicator light
Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
Check the status of the printer.
10 USB port
Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer control panel
15
Touch
To
1
2
3
4
5
Copy
Access the Copy menus and make copies.
Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
Menu icon
Access printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in ready state.
6
7
Status message bar
Status/Supplies
• Show the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.
• Show printer supply conditions such as Imaging unit lowor Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
• Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
• View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
This may also appear on the home screen:
Touch
To
Search Held Jobs
Jobs by user
Search current held jobs.
Access print jobs saved by user.
Access profiles and solutions.
Profiles and Solutions
Features
Feature
Description
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer control panel
16
Feature
Description
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Warning
Printer IP address
The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen
andappearsasfoursetsof numbersseparatedbyperiods. YoucanusetheIPaddress
when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer
settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Example: 123.123.123.123
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
Thecolorsofthe Sleepbuttonandindicatorlightsonthe printercontrolpanelsignifya certainprinterstatusorcondition.
Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light
Off
Printer status
The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking green
Solid green
Blinking red
The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light
Off
Printer status
The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
The printer is in Sleep mode.
Solid amber
Blinking amber
The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer control panel
17
1
7
6
3
2
5
4
Touch
Arrows
Copy It
To
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
View a list of options.
Print a copy.
Advanced Options Select a copy option.
Home
Go to the home screen.
Select a higher value.
Select a lower value.
Increase
Decrease
Tips
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch
To
Accept
Save a setting.
Cancel
Reset
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset values on the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
18
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.
Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:
• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network
For Windows users
1 Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd> OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /allto see additional useful information.
3 Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2 Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
19
3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4 Look for IPv4 Address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 20 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
20
Understanding the different applications
Use
To
Card Copy
Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
Fax
Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
92.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
Multi Send
Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
MyShortcut
Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
Scan to E‑mail
Scan to Computer
Scan to FTP
Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
Scan to Network
Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
.
2 Do either of the following:
• Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
• Click Software and Solutions > Other Apps.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
21
Use
To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
Use
To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
22
3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
Use
To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-
mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
Use
To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
23
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
Use
To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.
• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
24
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
• To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
25
3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To exportaconfiguration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
• To import a configuration file, do the following:
1 Click Import EmbeddedSolutionsSettingsFile> ChooseFile, and thenbrowse tothe savedconfiguration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
26
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electircal outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Available internal options
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
• Flash memory
– Fonts
– Firmware
• Forms and Barcode
• Prescribe
• IPDS
Note: The printer hard disk is an optional memory device that can be attached to the rear USB port of the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
27
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Access the controller board at the back of the printer.
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
2 Turn the screws counterclockwise to remove them.
3 Slightly open the controller board access cover, and then shift to the right to remove it.
2
1
4 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
28
1
2
1
2
Memory card connector
Option card connector
5 Reattach the cover.
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
29
6 Turn the screws clockwise to lock the cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Access the controller board.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
30
3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
2
1
4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.
1
2
5 Close the controller board access cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
31
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
32
4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5 Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
33
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional tray in the following order:
• Optional 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3)
• Optional 650‑sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
• Printer
Installing optional trays
The printer supports two optional input sources: a 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) and a 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2) with an
integrated multipurpose feeder.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Unpack the optional tray and the dust cover, and then remove all packing material.
2 Place the tray near the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
34
3 Align the 650‑sheet duo tray with the 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.
Notes:
• If you are installing both the optional trays, then the 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) must always be below the
650‑sheet tray (Tray 2).
• The standard 250‑sheet tray can be labeled as Tray 1 by using the tray number label that came with the
optional tray.
4 Align the printer with the 650‑sheet duo tray, and then lower the printer into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
35
5 Install the dust covers.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options
in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
36
7
1
2
6
3
4
5
Use the
To
1
2
3
Rear USB port
Attach an optional wireless network adapter or an optional printer hard disk.
Lock the controller board.
Security lock port
Printer power cord
socket
Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4
5
LINE port
Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL
filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to
send and receive faxes.
EXT port
Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this
connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
6
7
USB printer port
Ethernet port
Connect the printer to a computer using a USB cable.
Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:
• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
37
• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK.
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
In Macintosh
Click the CD icon on the desktop.
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
38
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Do either of the following:
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNetTM N8352 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the
adapter.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
39
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type: D:\setup.exe> OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:
• From the printer control panel
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
40
3 Install the printer driver on the computer.
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double‑click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.
4 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
41
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto >
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
42
Use
To
Search for networks
Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
43
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. If an option you installed
is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer has networking support, then use this page to verify that the network
connection is working. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
44
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
Ifthe status isNot Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
45
Loading paper and specialty media
This chapter covers the selection and handling of paper and specialty media. Proper selection and loading of media can
improve how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 240 and “Storing paper”
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and is loaded only in the multipurpose
feeder and manual feeder.
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches) and is loaded only in the
multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch
.
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an integrated manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-sheet duo
tray, and the 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same way.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job is printing or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
46
2 If the paper is longer than letter‑size paper, then squeeze and then slide the length guide at the back of the tray to
extend it.
1
2
3 Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
47
4 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
7 Place the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
48
8 Insert the tray.
9 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Mixing paper sizes or paper types in a tray may cause jams.
Loading the manual feeder
The standard 250‑sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of paper one
sheet at a time.
1 Load a sheet of paper into the manual feeder:
• Printable side facedown for one-sided printing
• Printable side faceup for two‑sided (duplex) printing
Note: There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on the mode of printing.
One‑sided printing using a letterhead Two‑sided printing using a letterhead
A B C
A B C
• Load envelope with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
2 Feed paper into the manual feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides.
Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high‑quality media designed for laser printers.
3 Adjust the paper guides to the width of the paper loaded.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not force the paper into the feeder. Forcing the paper may cause jams.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
49
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray
The 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2) consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The tray
is loaded in the same way as the 250‑sheet tray and the optional 550‑sheet tray, and supports the same paper types
and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1
2
3
1
2
3
Length guide tab
Paper size indicator
Width guide tab
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
50
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.
2 Open the multipurpose feeder.
3 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
51
4 Prepare the paper for loading.
• Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
• Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 Locate the maximum paper fill indicator and tab.
Note: Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper
guides.
1
2
3
4
Width guide tab
Maximum paper fill indicator
Width guide
Feeder extender
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
52
5
Paper size indicator
6 Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
• Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended printable side facedown and the top edge
entering the printer first.
• Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
Notes:
• Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
• Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
• Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder
and is not bent or wrinkled.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer links those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommend giving all unique paper, such as letterhead and
different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
53
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touch
.
4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
54
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Touch
.
Configuring a custom name
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
55
Paper and specialty media guide
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print a test page on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source
Printing
Printable side Paper orientation
Trays
One‑sided
Faceup
Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Trays
Two‑sided
Facedown
Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
A B C
Manual feeder
One‑sided
Facedown
Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
A B C
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser printers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
56
Source
Printing
Printable side Paper orientation
Manual feeder
Two‑sided
Faceup
Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
A B C
Multipurpose feeder
One‑sided
Facedown
Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder
Two‑sided
Faceup
Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser printers.
Tips on using transparencies
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
57
Tips on using envelopes
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist.
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
– Have an interlocking design.
– Have postage stamps attached.
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
– Have bent corners.
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex and fan the envelopes to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
58
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Paper guidelines
Select the correct paper or specialty media to reduce printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose
feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb)
bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or
heavier paper.
Note: Duplex printing is supported from 60–105‑g/m2 (16–28‑lb) bond grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is
too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
59
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment.
Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
60
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
61
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
This chapter provides information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Supported paper sizes
Note: Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper sizes as the
optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray
Multipurpose
550‑sheet
ADF
Scanner Duplex
tray
glass
mode
550‑sheet
tray
feeder
A4
1
1
1
1
2
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5
X
X
X
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)
A6
X
X
X
X
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
JIS B5
1
1
1
1
1
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
1
1
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
X
1
1
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
62
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray
Multipurpose
550‑sheet
ADF
Scanner Duplex
tray
glass
mode
550‑sheet
tray
feeder
Executive
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (Mexico)
X
X
1
1
1
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
1
1
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal
1,3
1,3
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal
X
X
X
X
1,2
1,2
1,2
4
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in).
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
X
X
X
X
1
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
63
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray
Multipurpose
550‑sheet
ADF
Scanner Duplex
tray
glass
mode
550‑sheet
tray
feeder
DL Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
C5 Envelope
X
X
X
1
1
1
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Supported paper types and weights
Notes:
• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper as the
550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
• Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guide
64
Paper type
250‑sheet Manual
tray feeder
650‑sheet duo tray
550‑sheet
ADF
Scanner
glass
Duplex
mode
tray
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Paper
• Plain
• Recycled
• Glossy
• Bond
• Letterhead
• Preprinted
• Colored
• Light
• Heavy
• Rough/Cott
on
• Custom
Type [x]
Card stock
X
X
Transparencie
s
X
X
X
X
Labels
X
X
• Paper
Envelope
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
65
Printing
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Depending on your printer model, touch
,
, or Submit.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
66
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the setting, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the setting, and then touch
.
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
Max Speed and Max Yield let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the factory
default setting.
• Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
• Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result to slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
67
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3 Touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
68
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busyappears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use
Notes:
or
to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
69
Recommended flash drives
File type
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .jpeg or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .tiff or .tif
• .png
• .fls
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select a print job type
Use
To
Max Invalid PIN
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Holdprintjobsin thecomputeruntilyou enterthePINfrom theprintercontrol
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration
Verify Job Expiration
Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It lets you examine
if the first copy is satisfactory or not. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration
Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
70
2 Touch
.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
71
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs, or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch
.
3 Press
on the keypad to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
72
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
73
Copying
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
74
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3 Touch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3 From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Touch
> Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
5 Touch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
75
3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that support transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the transparencies > Transparency
4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
3 Touch Copy to > Manual Feeder.
4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder.
5 Select the size of the letterhead, and then touch Letterhead > Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save As Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch
.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
76
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy > Copy It
Note: If the selected paper size is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer scales the size
automatically.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
77
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Auto Size Match > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Letter > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4 Touch
> Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
78
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch
or
to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Notes:
• The factory default setting for Scale is Auto.
• If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the
paper onto which you are copying.
• Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
5 Touch
.
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
79
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch
> Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
80
• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch
> Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Paper Saver > select the output you want >
> Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Header/Footer
4 Select Header or Footer, and then touch
.
5 Select where you want to insert the header or footer, then select a text option, and then touch
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
81
6 Select where you want to print the header or footer, and then touch
.
7 From the Header/Footer menu, touch
> Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Overlay > select an overlay message >
.
Note: The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and Draft.
4 Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Cancelingappears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, press
.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch
3 Press to return to the home screen.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
82
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option lets you select the paper size of the original document.
• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
Copy to
This option lets you select the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the type or size of paper you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually
load the paper in the manual feeder or multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not foundappears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch
or
on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
83
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Advanced Duplex
This option lets you specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how
documents are bound.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Margin Shift
This option lets you increase or reduce the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch
to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
or
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
84
Overlay
This option lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, and Custom. You can type a custom message in the ”Enter the Custom Text Overlay
and press OK” field. The message will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Cover Page Setup
This option lets you set up the cover page of copies and booklets.
Separator Sheets
This option lets you place a blank sheet of paper between copies, prints, pages, print jobs or copy jobs. The separator
sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
Header/Footer
This option lets you insert a header or footer and specify its location on a page.
Select one of the following:
• Bates number
• Custom text
• Date/Time
• Page number
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-
up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a
single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
NegativeImage, ScanEdge toEdge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, andTemperature settingsbefore you copythedocument.
Create Booklet
This option lets you create a sequence of printed and collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page
size of the original document and with all the pages in order. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
85
E-mailing
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small
items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper,
or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
86
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Typeaunique nameforthe e‑mailrecipient, andthentype thee‑mail address. Ifyou are enteringmultipleaddresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5 Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the recipient’s e‑mail address >
Note: To create a group of recipients, touch
, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 Touch Subject > type the e‑mail subject >
.
3 Touch Message > type your message >
.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
5 Touch Save As Shortcut.
6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch
.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
87
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch
add.
, and then enter the e‑mail address or shortcut number that you want to
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch
> E‑mail It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch
.
To enter additional recipients, touch
add.
, and then enter the e‑mail address or shortcut number that you want to
4 Touch
> E‑mail It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) >
> type the name of the recipient >
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
88
4 Touch the name of the recipient.
To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.
5 Touch
> E‑mail It.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address >
4 Touch Subject > type the e‑mail subject >
.
5 Touch Message > type your message >
.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address >
> Send as
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
89
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most
Web browsers and graphics programs.
• XPS—UsethistocreateasingleXML Paper Specification(XPS) file withmultiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5 Touch
> E‑mail It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears, or while Scan the Next Page/
Finish the Jobappears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
90
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
91
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Advanced Imaging
Thisoption letsyouadjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEGQuality, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e‑mail the
document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
92
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
UsetheADFformultiple‑pagedocumentsincludingtwo-
sided (duplex) pages.
Setting up the printer to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Note: The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.
During the initial printer setup, clear the Fax funtion and any other function you plan to set up later, and then press
Continue.
Note: The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
93
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
94
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
95
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the
port of the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
96
Connected to different wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
97
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the
port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
98
Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the
port of the printer, and then
connect the telephone to the port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
99
Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service
To connect:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the
port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
100
Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the
port of the printer.
Notes:
• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
101
• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the
port of the printer.
Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
102
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the
port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
port of the printer.
Part name
Part number
Lexmark adapter plug
40X8519
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
103
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack
LINE
EXT
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:
• The
port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
the
port of the printer.
• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
104
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.
N F N
Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
N
F
N
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
105
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the
port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
telephone system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch
.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
106
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
107
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 From the printer control panel keypad, enter the fax number or the shortcut number.
Note: To add recipients, touch
, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8 Click OK.
Notes:
• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
108
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book feature lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
> type the name of the recipient >
Note: You can only search for one name at a time.
4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
109
4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch
.
The time is increased or decreased in 30‑minute increments.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch
2 Touch
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch
, and then enter the other fax number.
.
.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
110
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4 From the Resolution area, touch
or
to change to the resolution you want.
Note: Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4 From the Darkness area, touch
or
to adjust the darkness setting of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
111
Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanningappears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanningappears or while
Scan the Next Pageand Finish the Jobappear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
112
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
113
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
• Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
• Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
• Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
114
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you change or adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
115
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
UsetheADFformultiple‑pagedocumentsincludingtwo- Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
sided (duplex) pages.
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer control panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
116
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address >
>
> type a name for the shortcut >
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information. If you enter a number
that is already in use, then you will be prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address >
> Scan It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
117
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Scan It.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Usethescannerglassforsingle-pagedocuments, smallitems(suchaspostcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive images when scanning to a computer. You can scan the document back to
the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the
printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
118
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.
3 Select your printer from the list.
Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in
the TCP/IP section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
119
4 Click Next > Close.
5 Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
• Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
• Right‑click the printer you want to configure.
6 From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.
7 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
• Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
• Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
• Scan for E‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
• Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8 Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progressappears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the
computer screen.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP Address
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
120
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
121
Select from the following content sources:
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Advanced Imaging
Thisoption letsyouadjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEGQuality, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the document.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
122
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Menu
Paper Menu
Reports
Network/Ports
Cyan Cartridge
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Active NIC
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Standard Network or
Network [x]
Standard USB
SMTP Setup
Waste Toner Bottle
Maintenance Kit
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Security
Settings
Help
Manage Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
Miscellaneous
Security Settings
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
Fax Shortcuts
[index of each
installed DLE]
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
E‑mail Guide
Fax Guide
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
FTP Guide
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Color Quality
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
123
Supplies menu
Use
To
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black Toner Cartridge
Show the status of the cyan, magenta, yellow, or black toner
cartridge.
Nearly Low
Low
Very Low
Replace
Missing
Defective
Missing or Unresponsive
Unsupported
Invalid Region
OK
Non‑genuine Lexmark Cartridge
Black or Color Imaging Kit
Show the status of the black or color imaging kit.
Nearly Low
Low
Very Low
Replace
Missing
Defective
Missing or Unresponsive
Unsupported
OK
Non‑genuine Lexmark Imaging Kit
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Show the status of the waste toner bottle.
Show the status of the maintenance kit.
Missing
OK
Maintenance Kit
Nearly Low
Low
Very Low
Replace
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
124
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use
To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
• The 650‑sheet duo tray must be installed in order for MP Feeder to
appear as a menu setting in the Paper menu.
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use
To
Tray [x] Size
A4
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
A5
JIS‑B5
Letter
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one
tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Universal
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Labels
Glossy
• Transparency is supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
125
Use
To
MP Feeder Size
A4
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• The menu item applies only when the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder)
is installed.
Legal
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Note: Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
126
Use
To
Manual Paper Size
A4
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
A5
default setting.
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
127
Substitute Size menu
Use
To
Substitute Size
Off
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paperappearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use
To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
Normal
Rough
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Glossy Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Heavy Glossy Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Labels Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
128
Use
To
Bond Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Colored Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Light Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Rough
Rough/Cotton Texture
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Rough
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
Normal
Rough
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if custom type is supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
129
Paper Weight menu
Use
To
Plain Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Transparency Weight
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Glossy Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Heavy Glossy Weight
Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Labels Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Envelope Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Light
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
130
Use
To
Letterhead Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Preprinted Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Light
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Rough/Cotton Weight
Specify the relative weight of the rough or cotton paper loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
Normal
Heavy
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use
To
Cardstock Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Cardstock as the paper type.
Off
Recycled Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Off
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
131
Use
To
Heavy Glossy Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Off
Labels Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type.
Off
Bond Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Off
Letterhead Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Preprinted Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Colored Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Off
Light Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Off
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Off
Rough/Cotton Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Rough/Cotton as the paper type.
Off
Custom [x] Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
132
Custom Types menu
Use
To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Associatea paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x]
name or a user‑defined custom name created in the Embedded Web Server or
MarkVisionTM Professional.
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting for Custom Type [x].
• The custom media type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder
in order to print from that source.
Envelope
Recycled
Paper
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected.
Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The Recycled paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
feeder in order to print from that source.
Envelope
Custom Names menu
Use
To
Custom Name [x]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use
To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options.
Notes:
• The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer
menus.
1–8.5 inches (25–215.9 mm)
Height
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
the international factory default setting.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”
On
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
133
Universal Setup menu
Use
To
Units of Measure
Inches
Specify the unit of measure.
Note: Inches is the U.S. factory default setting. Millimeters is the
Millimeters
international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–215.9 mm
Set the width for portrait orientation.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 215.9 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the height for portrait orientation.
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use
To
Menu Settings Page
Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics
Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages.
Network Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only when there is more than one network
option installed and only in network printers or printers connected to print
servers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
134
Use
To
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log
Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Print Directory
Print a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or in
printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Asset Report
Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports
Active NIC menu
Use
To
Active NIC
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Auto
Notes:
[list of available network cards]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
135
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Off
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Off
On
Notes:
Auto
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
136
Use
To
Mac Binary PS
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
Auto
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Display and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use
To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use
To
View Card Status
Connected
View the connection status of the network card.
Disconnected
View Card Speed
View the speed of an active network card.
View the network addresses.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
137
Use
To
Job Timeout
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0, 10–225 seconds
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalidappears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use
To
Set Hostname
Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
Gateway
View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
138
Use
To
WINS Server Address
View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address
View or change the current DNS server address.
View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use
To
Enable IPv6
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname
Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
139
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use
To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Enable
Disable
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network
Select an available network for the printer to use.
View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Signal Quality
View Security Mode
View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use
To
Activate
Yes
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
View Name
Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
140
Use
To
View Address
Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network]
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
141
Use
To
USB Buffer
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Disabled
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to [maximum size allowed]
• Disabled turns off job buffering.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size
of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
Auto
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
SMTP Setup menu
Use
To
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
SMTP Timeout
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
5–30
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
142
Use
To
Use SSL
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server.
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
None
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt user
• “Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
143
Security menu
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use
To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. You can choose from 1 to 10 attempts. The factory default setting
is 3.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. You can choose from 1 to
60 minutes. The factory default setting is 5 minutes.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. You can choose from 1 to 60 minutes. The factory default
setting is 5 minutes. The printer does not impose a lockout time if you set to 1
minute.
• Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging the user off. You can choose from 1 to 900
seconds. The factory default setting is 30 seconds.
• Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. You can choose from 1 to 120
minutes. The factory default setting is 10 minutes.
Minimum PIN Length
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
1–16
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use
To
Max Invalid PIN
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Off
2–10
Notes:
• This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Off
1 hour
Notes:
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
144
Use
To
Repeat Job Expiration
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Verify Job Expiration
Off
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
Use
To
Wiping Mode
Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Auto
Automatic Method
Single pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Multiple pass
Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
145
Security Audit Log menu
Use
To
Export Log
Let an authorized user export the security audit log.
Note: The log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a
computer.
Delete Log
Yes
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Configure Log
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Enable Audit
Notes:
Yes
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
No
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
Enable Remote Syslog
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
No
Yes
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Severity of events to log
0–7
Set Date and Time menu
Use
To
Current Date and Time
View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time
Enter the date and time.
[input date/time]
Notes:
• Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
• The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM format.
Time Zone
Select the time zone.
[list of time zones]
Note: GMT is the factory default settings.
Automatically observe DST
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTP
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
146
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use
To
Display Language
English
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
Francais
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Show supply estimates
Show estimates
Display the estimates of the supplies on the printer control panel,
Embedded Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics
reports.
Do not show estimates
Note: “Show estimates” is the factory default setting.
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
147
Use
To
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Specify a custom beep when paper is loaded in the ADF.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Disabled
Quiet Mode
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Run the setup wizard.
Notes:
Yes
No
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
148
Use
To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard.
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Specify the default system of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
Metric
• U.S. is the factory default setting.
• Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this setting also changes the default for each input
source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu.
• Changing this setting also changes the default for the
Original Size setting in the following menus: Copy Settings,
Fax Settings, E-mail Settings, FTP Settings, and the Scan
Settings section of Flash Drive Menu Settings.
Scan to PC Port Range
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
[port range]
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
149
Use
To
Displayed Information
Left side
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
Forthe“Leftside”and“Rightside”menus, selectfromthefollowing
options:
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[text entry]
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text [x]
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Customize the displayed information for the Black Toner, Cyan
Toner, Magenta Toner, Yellow Toner, Fuser, and Transfer Module
settings.
Cyan Toner
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Magenta Toner
Yellow Toner
Fuser
Transfer Module
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”
• Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
150
Use
To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Specify the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors settings.
Select from the following options:
Display
Load Paper
Yes
Service Errors
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.
• Default is the factory default setting for “Type of Message to
Display”.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon or button, select from the following options:
Display
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Do Not Display
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Basic Card Copy
Scan to Network
My Shortcuts
Multi-Send
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Notes:
• MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
151
Use
To
Time Format
Format the printer time.
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.
20–100
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Button Feedback
Notes:
On
Off
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Volume
1–10
Show Bookmarks
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Yes
No
Notes:
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• If you select No, then the Bookmarks container is never
shown in Held Jobs.
Allow Background Removal
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Allow Custom Job Scans
Determine if Custom Job and Custom Job scanning settings appear
for copy, scan, and fax jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Page level
Notes:
• “Job level” is the factory default setting.
• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be
rescanned if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
30–300
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
152
Use
To
Contact Name
Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location
Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Set an alarm when the printer requires operator intervention.
When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times
that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing
when a cartridge-low condition occurs.
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
• Off
• Single
• Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and
Cartridge Alarm. This sounds three quick beeps.
• Off means no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
1–240
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
Set the printer to operate at a low power state.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Class A and Class B
printers in all countries except for European Union countries
and Switzerland.
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
• “3 days” is the factory default setting for Class B printers in
all European Union countries and Switzerland.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
153
Use
To
Timeouts
Set the printer to follow the setting of “Hibernate Timeout” even
when an active Ethernet or fax connection exists.
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Notes:
Do Not Hibernate
• Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
• If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to Do Not
Hibernate, then the device never automatically hibernates.
• If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to Hibernate,
then the device follows the value of the “Hibernate Timeout”
setting, except when it is set to Disabled.
Timeouts
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to Ready state.
Screen Timeout
15–300
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Set the printer to continue the specified job without returning to
the home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This follows the normal
Screen Timeout expires workflow.
• On continues to show the same screen and allows the user
to reset the Screen Timeout timer instead of returning to the
home screen.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.
1–255
Notes:
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
15–65535
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
154
Use
To
Timeouts
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for user
intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources
and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.
Note: “Reboot always” is the factory default setting.
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Notes:
• 5 is the factory default setting.
• If the printer performs a number of automatic reboots that is
the same as the menu setting within a certain amount of
time, then the printer shows the applicable error instead of
restarting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
5–255
Print Recovery
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Jam Recovery
Notes:
On
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Off
Auto
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
Print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
On
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
155
Use
To
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
Hibernate
• Sleep is the factory default setting.
• Do Nothing ignores any Sleep button presses regardless of
duration.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press
of the Sleep button.
Sleep
Hibernate
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting. This ignores any
Sleep button presses regardless of duration.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore printer settings to its factory defaults.
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now restores all printer settings to the factory
default settings except those in Network/Ports menu. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.
Export Configuration Package
Export the printer configuration package to a flash drive.
Export
Note: The configuration package cannot be exported unless a
flash drive is attached to the printer.
Copy Settings menu
Use
To
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color
On
Specify whether copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
156
Use
To
Allow color copies
Enable color in copies.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Setting this to Off hides all color‑specific menus.
• This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side, and the copy
will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
Allow copying of two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Print Page Borders
Allow page borders in printed copies.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Note: "(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
157
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder
Transparency Separators
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Specify the separator sheet source.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Multipurpose Feeder
Darkness
Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
1–999
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
158
Use
To
Header/Footer
[Location]
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
Select from the following location options:
• Top left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
• Top middle
• Top right
• Bottom left
• Bottom middle
• Bottom right
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Custom Overlay
Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Copy in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
Automatically center the content on the page.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
159
Use
To
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during copies, and how much the dropout is increased or
decreased.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Scan edge to edge
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.
‑4 to 4
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values
generate a redder output than the default.
Sample Copy
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
160
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use
To
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Specify how the fax is identified.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Enable Manual Fax
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
• “Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
Mostly send
All send
• “Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Specify whether the printer cancels fax jobs.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Don't Allow
Caller ID
Off
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Primary
Alternate
Fax number masking
Off
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
From left
From right
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to Mask”
setting.
Digits to Mask
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
0–58
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
161
Use
To
Fax Cover Page
Configure the fax cover page.
Fax Cover Page
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Fax Send Settings
Use
To
Resolution
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
162
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Darkness
Adjust the darkness of the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix
Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
163
Use
To
Dialing Prefix Rules
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Prefix Rule [x]
Automatic Redial
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
0–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
1–200
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Yes
No
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Pulse
Max Speed
2400
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
Show a preview on the display for scan jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
164
Use
To
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop, and how much the dropout is increased or decreased.
Color Dropout
Notes:
None
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Red
Green
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto
Off
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
On
Scan edge to edge
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document prior to faxing.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
165
Use
To
Temperature
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.
Notes:
‑4 to 4
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values
generate a redder output than the default.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Enable color faxing.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Always use
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Fax Receive Settings
Use
To
Enable Fax Receive
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Toner
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
1–25
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Allow the printer to answer an incoming fax job.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
0–9
Notes:
• 9 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
166
Use
To
Paper Source
Auto
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder
Sides (Duplex)
Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Before Job
After Job
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Specify where the printer picks the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Fax Footer
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding
Print
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Print and Forward
Forward
Forward to
Fax
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
eSF
Forward to Shortcut
Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
specified.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List
Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
167
Use
To
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable Color Fax Receive
Enable the printer to receive fax in color.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use
To
Transmission Log
Print log
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Logs Display
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
name returned.
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
168
Speaker Settings
Use
To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
On until Connected
Always On
• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
Control the volume setting.
High
Low
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Off
On
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use
To
All Rings
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Single Ring Only
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Use
To
To Format
Enter specific fax information using the virtual keyboard on the printer control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup
Specify SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specify SMTP server port information.
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the image type for scanning to fax.
Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
TIFF (.tif)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
169
Use
To
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the content was originally produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Fax Resolution
Standard
Specify the resolution level for scanning to fax.
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Darkness
Adjust the darkness of the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
170
Use
To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single‑page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Enable receiving of analog faxes.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Specify e‑mail server information.
Notes:
Message
• You can type up to 255 characters in the Subject field.
• You can type up to 512 characters in the Message field.
• You can type up to 53 characters in the File Name field.
File Name
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).
Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
Size Error Message
Note: You can type up to 1024 characters.
E‑mail Server Setup
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Limit destinations
Note: You can specify only one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Define the e‑mail server path name, for example: /directory/path.
Notes:
• The characters * : ? < > |are invalid entries for a path name.
• You can type up to 128 characters for Server, Login, Password, Path, and Web
Link.
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
• You can type up to 53 characters for File Name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
171
Use
To
Format
Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Set the version of the PDF file to be scanned for e‑mailing.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color
Off
Specify whether to print copies in color.
On
Resolution
75 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
Adjust the darkness of the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
172
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
• When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
173
Use
To
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Specify how images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Web Link
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Note: “Print log “is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
E‑mail Bit Depth
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
1 bit
8 bit
Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When this is set to Off, the “Save as Shortcut” button does not appear on the
e-mail Destination screen.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
174
Use
To
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.
‑4 to 4
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default, while “warm” values
generate a redder output than the default.
Use cc:/bcc:
Enable the use of the “cc” and “bcc” fields.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
175
FTP Settings menu
Use
To
Format
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color
Off
Specify whether to print copies in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Resolution
75 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
Adjust the darkness of the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
176
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
• When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and the quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
177
Use
To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
8 bit
File Name
Type a base file name.
Note: You can type up to 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
178
Use
To
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.
‑4 to 4
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values
generate a redder output than the default.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
179
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings menu
Use
To
Format
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Note: “PDF (.pdf)” is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A1‑a
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color
On
Specify whether the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and
white.
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
Adjust the darkness of the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
180
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
• Legal, Folio, and Oficio (Mexico) paper sizes are supported only in the ADF.
• When set, a defined custom name appears instead of Custom Scan Size [x].
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is reduced.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
181
Use
To
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
8 bit
Note: “8 bit” is the factory default setting.
File Name
Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter a maximum of 53 characters.
Custom Job scanning
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
Show a preview on the display for scan jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible in a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much the dropout is increased
or decreased.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
182
Use
To
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.
Auto
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Scan edge to edge
Allow edge-to-edge scanning of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs.
Notes:
‑4 to 4
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values
generate a redder output than the default.
Print Settings menu
Use
To
Copies
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
1–999
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Color
Specify whether the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and white.
Color
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Black Only
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
183
Use
To
Collate
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
2 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the
page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver
Off
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Notes:
2‑Up
• Off is the factory default setting.
3‑Up
• When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that the number
of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Border
Print a border on each page.
None
Solid
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of pages and their orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“(1,2,3) (1,2,3)”. If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
184
Use
To
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print
Print
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use
To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software
program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job Waiting
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable
printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate print queue, so
other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained,
the stored jobs print.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the
printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
Fit to Page
Whole Page
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image
at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non‑printable area
defined by the Normal setting. Whole Page only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Set the printer for a faster print speed or for a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
Black Only Mode
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
185
Use
To
Download Target
Set the storage location for downloads.
RAM
Flash
Disk
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the RAM is
temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in
permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer
hard disk even when the printer is turned off.
• This menu item appears only when a flash drive or a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros
stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than
is available.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads
only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print
jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the
printer runs out of memory, then Memory Full [38]appears, and
downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is
selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in
alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Newest First
Finishing menu
Use
To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
2 sided
• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
186
Use
To
Copies
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
1–999
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Paper Saver
Off
Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
2‑Up
• Off is the factory default setting.
3‑Up
• When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that
the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Specify theorder in which pages are printed on a singlesheet whenusing Paper Saver.
Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or in landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
Landscape
landscape.
Portrait
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
187
Use
To
Paper Saver Border
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
None
Solid
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use
To
Print Mode
Color
Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color.
Notes:
Black Only
• Color is the factory default setting.
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.
Color Correction
Auto
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Notes:
Off
Manual
• Auto is the factory default setting. This applies different color conversion tables
to each object on the printed page.
• Off turns off color correction.
• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from
the Manual Color menu.
• Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch or in color quality (CQ).
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
4800 CQ
Toner Darkness
Lighten or darken the printed output.
1–5
Notes:
• 4 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
• You can set this option from the software program.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
188
Use
To
Color Saver
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used
for text is not reduced.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.
‑6 to 6
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
0–5
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Saturation
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
0–5
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan
Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being
used for each color.
‑5 to 5
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Notes:
• Selecting any setting prints the sample.
• Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help
decide which combinations to use to get the printed output you want.
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
• To access a complete list of color sample pages using the Embedded Web Server,
type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
189
Use
To
Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
RGB Graphics
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Notes:
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer
monitor.
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. This
applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business
graphics and text.
• Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated
colors.
• “Display—True Black” applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner
for neutral gray colors.
• Off turns off color conversion.
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Notes:
• US CMYK is the factory default setting. This applies a color conversion table that
tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.
• Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. This applies a color
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches Euroscale color
output.
• Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US conversion table.
• Off turns off color conversion.
Spot Color Replacement
Color Adjust
Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only in the Embedded Web Server.
Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Notes:
• Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected. Adjusting colorappears
on the display until the process is finished.
• Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as
room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer
algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
190
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use
To
Job Accounting Log
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities
Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Monthly
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Disk Near Full Level
Specify the maximum size of the log file.
Off
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
1–99
Disk Near Full Action
None
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Disk Full Action
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
URL to Post Logs
Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
191
Use
To
E‑mail to Send Logs
Log File Prefix
Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use
To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
Not Restored
All
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Format the flash memory.
Yes
No
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Do Not Delete
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace
Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
192
Use
To
Coverage Estimator
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use
To
Print Error Pages
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use
To
Scale to Fit
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Yes
No
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use
To
Print PS Error
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
Flash/Disk
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
193
Use
To
Image Smoothing
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smoothen
their color transitions.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Use
To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
Download
Flash
All
• “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Courier 10
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
12U PC‑850
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
1.00–1008.00
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
194
Use
To
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
0.08–100
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
Portrait
Landscape
• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
198 mm
203 mm
• “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
195
Use
To
Tray Renumber
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Assign MP Feeder
Off
Notes:
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
• “Off” is the factory default setting.
• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
Off
None
• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
196
HTML menu
Use
To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Courier
Times
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Use
To
Font Size
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
1–255 pt
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
Scale
1–400%
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
197
Use
To
Margin Size
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
8–255 mm
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use
To
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Auto Fit
On
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
Off
for some images.
Invert
On
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Fit Width
Orientation
Portrait
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, e‑mailing, and
faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding printer menus
198
Menu item
Description
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
Prints all the guides
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E‑mail Guide
Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Color Quality
Provides information about solving color quality issues
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Provides help in locating additional information
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
199
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
Conserving supplies
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar, to see what the
document will look like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
200
Avoid paper jams
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 240.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use
To
Off
Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
201
Use
To
On
Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off
Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3 Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode. Select from 1 to 120.
The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Note: The printer still accepts print jobs when in Sleep mode.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Touch
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
202
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3 Touch Hibernate >
.
Setting Hibernate Timeout
Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a
reduced power state.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer
to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.
4 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
203
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout
2 Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.
3 Touch
.
Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4 From the Time menu, select the time.
5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6 Click Add.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
204
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3 Touch
.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
• The Notices chapter
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives tominimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
205
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
206
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop computers in
the location shown to secure the printer in place.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory
Description
Volatile memory
Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory
Hard disk memory
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for printer-specific functionality. This
lets the printer retain buffered user data from complex print
jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
207
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data are completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the
progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
208
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
209
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
2 In the Search field, type the model name of your printer, and then click Go.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
210
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin, multipurpose feeder, and manual feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
211
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.
1
2
3
4
White underside of the ADF cover
White underside of the scanner cover
Scanner glass
ADF glass
4 Close the scanner cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
212
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > View Supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
differentfromthehistorical printingconsumption. Considerthe variablelevel of accuracy beforepurchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume
future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page
content.
* Average continuous black or composite CMY declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
213
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause
cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Return Program cartridges
Item
United States and Canada
European Union (EU),
European Economic Area
(EEA), and Switzerland
Rest of the world
Return Program toner cartridges
Black
801K
801C
802K
808K
808C
808M
808Y
Cyan
802C
802M
802Y
Magenta
Yellow
801M
801Y
Standard Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black
801SK
801SC
801SM
801SY
802SK
802SC
802SM
802SY
808SK
Cyan
808SC
808SM
808SY
Magenta
Yellow
High Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black
Cyan
801HK
801HC
802HK
802HC
808HK
808HC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
214
Item
United States and Canada
European Union (EU),
European Economic Area
(EEA), and Switzerland
Rest of the world
Magenta
Yellow
801HM
801HY
802HM
802HY
808HM
808HY
Regular cartridges
Item
Worldwide
Standard Yield regular toner cartridges
Black
800S1
800S2
800S3
800S4
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
High Yield regular toner cartridges
Black
800H1
800H2
800H3
800H4
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Ordering imaging kits
Item
All countries and regions
Black imaging kit
Color imaging kit
700Z1
700Z5
Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The fuser and transfer module are included in the maintenance kit and can also be individually ordered and
replaced, if necessary.
• To replace the maintenance kit, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative.
Part name
Type
Supply number
Maintenance kit
115 V
220 V
100 V
40X7615
40X7616
40X7617
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
215
Ordering a waste toner bottle
Item
All countries and regions
Waste toner bottle
C540X75G
Replacing supplies
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1
2
3
4
Top door
Waste toner bottle
Right side cover
Front door
1 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
216
3 Open the top door.
4 Remove the right side cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
217
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
6 Seal the used waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 204.
7 Insert the replacement waste toner bottle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
218
8 Insert the right side cover.
9 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
10 Close the front door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
219
Replacing a black and color imaging kit
1 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Open the top door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
220
3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling them away from the imaging kit.
4 Remove the right side cover.
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
221
6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
7 Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
8 Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.
Notes:
• The color imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black developer units.
• The black imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black developer unit.
9 Seal the used imaging kit in the bag that the replacement imaging kit came in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
222
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 204.
Note: When replacing the black imaging kit, save the cyan, magenta, and yellow developer units. Dispose only
the black developer unit.
10 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side‑to‑side.
11 Remove the red packing strip and the attached fabric from the developer units.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
223
12 Gently insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.
Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into the matching color slot.
13 Remove the red packing strip from the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may
affect the quality of future print jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
224
14 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
15 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
16 Insert the waste toner bottle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
225
17 Insert the right side cover.
18 Insert the toner cartridges.
19 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
226
20 Close the front door.
Replacing toner cartridges
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non‑Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under
warranty.
Note: A reduced print quality may result from using non‑Lexmark toner cartridges.
1 Open the top door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
227
2 Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling it away from the imaging kit.
3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then remove its packaging.
4 Align the new toner cartridge, and then press the cartridge down until it fits into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
228
5 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
6 Seal the used toner cartridge in the bag that the replacement toner cartridge came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 204.
Replacing a developer unit
Replace the developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.
1 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
229
2 Open the top door.
3 Lift the toner cartridge handle, and then gently pull it from the imaging kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
230
4 Remove the right side cover.
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
231
7 Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. Doing so could damage the
imaging kit.
8 Remove the used developer unit.
9 Gently shake the replacement developer unit side‑to‑side before removing it from its packaging.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
232
10 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.
11 Insert the developer unit.
12 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
233
13 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
14 Replace the waste toner bottle.
15 Insert the right side cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
234
16 Insert the toner cartridges.
17 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
18 Close the front door.
19 Seal the used developer unit in the bag that the replacement developer unit came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 204.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
235
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
236
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
237
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
• You can select alerts for toner cartridges, imaging kit, maintenance kit, and waste toner bottle.
• All alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all alerts can be set for the
end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail alert is available for all supply conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification
Off
Description
The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only
The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning
The printer shows the warning message and generates an email about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1
Non Continuable Stop1,2
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The user needs to
press a button to continue printing.
The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to
continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
238
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3 To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4 Click Printer Settings.
5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6 Click Copy Printer Settings.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
239
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
240
Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
241
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Note: When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, Auto does not
guarantee that the page will print.
Jam location
Message on the display
What to do
1
2
Automatic document [x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then
feeder (ADF)
Standard bin
top cover [28y.xx]
remove the jammed paper.
Remove the jammed paper.
[x]‑page jam, clear standard
bin [203.xx]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
242
Jam location
Fuser
Message on the display
What to do
3
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear Open the front door, then pull the tab and hold the
fuser [202.xx]
fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed
paper.
4
5
6
7
8
Front door
Duplex area
Tray [x]
[x]‑page jam, open front door [20y.xx] Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper.
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
duplex [23y.xx]
paper.
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]
Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
Push the paper release lever to lift the paper rollers,
and then remove the jammed paper.
feeder [250.xx]
Manual feeder
[x]‑page jam, clear manual
Remove the jammed paper.
feeder [251.xx]
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]
1 Open the top door.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
243
3 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
a If there is a jammed paper under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
244
b Pull the green lever to open the fuser cover.
c If there is a jammed paper in the fuser, then hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
245
4 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
5 Close the front door.
6 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
to confirm.
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]
1 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
246
2 Open the top door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
247
3 Pull the green lever to open the fuser cover.
4 Hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
248
5 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
6 Close the front door.
7 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
to confirm.
[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx]
1 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
249
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the front door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
to confirm.
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]
1 Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
250
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the front door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
to confirm.
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
251
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
to confirm.
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
252
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]
1 Pull out the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
to confirm.
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx]
1 Push the paper release lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the jammed paper, and then gently pull out the
paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
253
2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
254
4 Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper stack.
1
2
5 From the printer control panel, touch
models, select Next >
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
> Clear the jam, press OK >
.
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
255
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.
6 From the printer control panel, touch
models, select Next >
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
> Clear the jam, press OK >
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
256
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Cancel the print job.
Close door
Make sure the right side cover is installed, and then close the front and top doors to clear the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
257
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job is removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
258
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
Note: The printer hard disk and the flash drive are supported only in select printer models.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Remove, and then reinstall the indicated tray to clear the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
259
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size of paper in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
• Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure
the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the indicated tray into the printer.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data from the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save, clear the
message, and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
260
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper
source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer
cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
261
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press
on the printer control panel
on the printer control panel
on the printer control panel
on the printer control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press
to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press
to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press
to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
262
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If
necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Install additional printer memory.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
263
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or the imaging kit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or its associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press
and hold
and the # button on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
and
simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and
continue printing.
If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the missing toner cartridge. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge may be defective. Replace the
cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the missing imaging kit. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive imaging kit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging kit may be defective. Replace the
imaging kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
264
Reload printed pages in Tray [x]
Try any of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing the second side of the
sheet. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
1 Remove any remaining packing material from the indicated location.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace [color] cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
Replace [color] cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Region number
Region
0
1
2
8
9
Global
United States, Canada
European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
Rest of the world
Invalid
Notes:
• The x and y values represent .xyin the error code that appears on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
265
Replace the indicated imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Replace defective [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Replace the defective toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement toner cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide
Replace defective [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Replace the defective imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
266
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.comor your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Replace missing [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Install the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section
of the User’s Guide.
Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Install the indicated imaging kit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
Replace unsupported [type] imaging kit [32.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Remove the indicated imaging kit, and then install a supported one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
267
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Select Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
268
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Supply needed to complete job
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies
are needed to continue processing the current job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to clear the
message and continue printing.
1 Order the missing supply immediately.
2 Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• Cancel the print job, then install the missing supply, and then resend the print job.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
269
Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to order an imaging kit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message
and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to replace the imaging kit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.
Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
270
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Unplug the other
Go to step 5.
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
271
Action
Step 5
Yes
No
Go to step 6.
Makesureto matchthe
following:
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
• The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6
Turn on the switch or Go to step 7.
reset the breaker.
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 8.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8
Go to step 9.
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Go to step 10.
Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.
Makesureto installall hardwareoptionsproperlyandremoveanypacking
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Step 10
Go to step 11.
Go to step 12.
Use correct printer
driver settings.
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Step 11
Install the correct
printer driver.
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
272
Printer display is blank
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Readyappear on the printer display?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Do Please waitand Readyappear on the printer display?
Option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
a Turnofftheprinterusingthepowerswitch,andthenunplugthepower
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the internal
option.
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
273
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Cannot detect memory card
Action
Yes
No
Make sure the memory card is installed.
Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer
controller board.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the
Installed Options list.
Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?
Tray problems
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray working?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
274
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action
Yes
No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to Onor
Auto.
c Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
275
Paper frequently jams
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action
Yes
No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
276
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
information, see
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.
b Fromthe PrintandHolddialog, selectthe “Keepduplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
277
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Step 2
Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
print the documents.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
a Check for an error message on the display.
b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 4
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
Does the error message still appear?
Step 5
Contact customer
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Incorrect characters print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Deactivate Hex Trace Go to step 2.
mode.
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hexappears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
278
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Large jobs do not collate
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
279
Action
Step 3
Yes
No
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
Printing slows down
Notes:
• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced if printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action
Yes
No
Place letter‑ or A4‑size paper in the tray, and then resend the print job. The problem is solved. Contact customer
Does the print speed increase?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
280
Print jobs do not print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Readyappears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Ifan error message appears on the printerdisplay, thenclear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 5
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
Note: The printer software is available at
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
281
Print job takes longer than expected
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 5
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For moreinformation, seethesetupdocumentation thatcame
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
282
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in thePaper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action
Yes
No
Increase the printing timeout.
The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
c Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
283
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
a Print a font sample listto checkif thefonts you areusing are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2 Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Resend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
Step 2
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
284
Action
Step 2
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• From the printer
control panel,
change the paper
size to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
• From the printer
control panel,
change the paper
type to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Step 4
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Gray background on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
285
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Reduce the toner darkness.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
density.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
Step 2
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
286
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
287
Action
Step 3
Yes
No
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
Paper curl
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Adjust the width and
length guides.
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
The problem is solved.
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 5
Contact customer
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
288
Print irregularities
Leading edge
)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Is the tray set to the size and type of the paper loaded in the tray?
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 4
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 5.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5
Go to step 6.
The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
289
Action
Yes
No
Step 6
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Print is too dark
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color
Adjust.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type,
texture, and weight
specified in the tray
settings.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 4
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
290
Action
Yes
No
Step 5
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded on
the tray.
Go to step 6.
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 6
Go to step 7.
The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 7
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Print is too light
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color
Adjust.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
a Fromthe Qualitymenu on the printercontrolpanel, increasethetoner
darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
291
Action
Step 3
Yes
No
Go to step 4.
Specify the paper type,
texture, and weight
from the tray settings
to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 4
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 5
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray
Go to step 5.
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 6
Go to step 7.
The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Printer is printing blank pages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
292
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging kit.
1 Remove the imaging kit.
2 Checkifthepackingmaterialisproperlyremovedfromtheimaging
kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
3 Reinstall the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Printer is printing solid black pages
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
293
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Action
Yes
No
1 Check if the
Step 1
Go to step 2.
distance between
the defects is
equal to one of the
following:
Measure the distance between the defects.
Check for a distance between the defects that equals:
• 25.1 mm (0.98 in.)
• 29.8 mm (1.17 in.)
• 43.9 mm (1.72 in.)
• 45.5 mm (1.79 in.)
• 94.2 mm (3.70 in.)
• 37.7 mm
(1.48 in.)
• 78.5 mm
(3.09 in.)
• 95 mm
(3.74 in.)
Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?
2 Take note of the
distance, and then
contact customer
support at
xmark.com or
your service
representative.
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do the repeating defects still appear?
Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Trailing edge
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
294
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Checkifthepaperloadedinthetrayhasthecorrectpapertypeandweight.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Skewed print
)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
295
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
type and weight
from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper in the tray?
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type and weight
specified in the tray
settings.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
The problem is solved.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
296
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Step 4
Go to step 5.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of the
following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
297
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
298
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
ABC
DEF
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type
and weight.
Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 2
panel, set the paper
Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.
texture.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Toner specks appear on prints
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
299
Transparency print quality is poor
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Set the paper type to
Transparency.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Uneven print density
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Is the print density uneven?
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
a Check if your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
300
Action
Step 2
Yes
No
Go to step 3.
The problem is solved.
a From the Paper Menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type and paper weight.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
The problem is solved.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load paper source with a recommended type of paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 4
The problem is solved.
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
301
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify the document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they
let users modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the help information of your
operating system.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the color you want. The object information determines
the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to
text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
• When Auto Color Correction is selected, the color conversion tables will generate preferred colors used for
the majority of the documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table, do the following:
1 From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color
conversion table for the affected object type.
Object type
Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
• Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
• sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor.
RGB Graphics
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. This uses only black toner
to create all levels of neutral gray.
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction.
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing business graphics.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
302
Object type
Color conversion tables
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
• US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
• Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate Euroscale
color output.
CMYK Graphics
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
Nine types of Color Samples sets are available from the Quality menu on the printer control panel. These are also
available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a
multiple‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on
each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB
combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box whose color is the closest to the color you want. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the help information of your operating system.
Note: Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular
object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used , the type of object being printed, and how the color of the object is specified in the software
program. When Color Correction is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information, and no color conversion
is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected
Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest
projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action
Step 1
Yes
No
Go to step 2.
Set the paper type to
Transparency.
From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to
Transparency.
Is the paper type setting correct?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
303
Action
Step 3
Yes
No
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and
then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The color of the print does not match the color of the original file
Note: The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a
standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors,
there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Set Color Correction to Off.
Note: When the printer color correction is disabled, the color is
based on the print job information, and no color conversion is
implemented.
b Resend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer
screen?
Step 2
From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, do the following:
a Select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
b Select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion
table for the affected object type.
c Resend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer
screen?
The print appears tinted
Action
Yes
No
Adjust the color balance.
a From the Color Balance menu on the printer control panel, increase
or decrease the values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print still appear tinted?
Solving copy problems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
304
Copier does not respond
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Cleartheerrororstatus Go to step 2.
message.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Did Performing Self Testand Readyappear?
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Yes
No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
305
Poor copy quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Cleartheerrororstatus Go to step 2.
message.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Go to step 5.
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Go to step 8.
The problem is solved.
Check for patterns on print.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Copy > Sharpness > select a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
306
Action
Yes
No
The problem is solved.
Step 8
Go to step 9.
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
• Sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
• Contrast—Increase the contrast setting.
b Resend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Step 9
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Darkness—Increase the current setting.
b Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Partial document or photo copies
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Step 3
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
307
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Action
Yes
No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Cleartheerrororstatus Go to step 2.
message.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Readyappears on the
display.
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Readyappears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Readyappear on the display?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
308
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
Go to step 5.
Securely connect the
cables.
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Step 5
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 6
Go to step 7.
Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-
interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connectingto an analog connectionon thePBX. If noneexists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
309
Action
Yes
No
• Try calling the fax
Step 7
Go to step 8.
number to make
sure that it is
Check for a dial tone.
working properly.
Did you hear a dial tone?
• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.
Step 8
The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 9
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 10
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
310
Can send but not receive faxes
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
Can receive but not send faxes
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
311
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action
Yes
No
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.
c Select a language, and then touch
.
d Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
e Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
f Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
312
Received fax has poor print quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy]appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Solving scanner problems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
313
The scanner does not respond
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Turn on the switch or Go to step 5.
reset the breaker.
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 5
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
314
Action
Step 7
Yes
No
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
Scan job was not successful
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Connect the cables
properly.
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Step 3
Close the file you are Go to step 4.
scanning.
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Step 4
Contact customer
Selectthe Appendtime
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
CheckifeithertheAppendtimestamportheOverwriteexisting file check
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Yes
No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
315
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is solved.
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Step 2
Contact customer
The problem is solved.
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Poor scanned image quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Increase the scan
resolutionsettingsfor a
higher‑quality output.
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
316
Action
Yes
No
Step 6
Go to step 7.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Check the scan settings.
FromtheScanscreen, makesuretheContentTypeandContentSource
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Problem solved.
Contact customer
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Partial document or photo scans
Action
Yes
No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Contact customer
Load the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Cannot scan from a computer
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 3.
Go to step 2.
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Readyappears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Readyappear before scanning the job?
Step 2
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 3
Contact customer
Tighten the cable
connections.
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
317
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Contact customer
Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Turn on the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
318
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
a View the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type
“https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP address
to access the Embedded Web Server.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Check if the network is working.
a Print a network setup page.
b Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the
status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection may be
intermittent, or the network cable may be defective. Contact your
system support person for a solution, and then print another
network setup page.
c Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
d Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 4
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
a Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the setup
documentation that came with the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 5
The problem is solved. Contact your system
support person.
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web
sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
319
Contacting customer support
When you contactcustomer support, you willneed tobeable todescribe theproblem youareexperiencing, themessage
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail
You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat
You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
320
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark CX410e and CX410de
Machine type:
7527
Model(s):
415, 436
Edition notice
October 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212or48C.F.R.227.7202,asapplicable. Consistentwith48C.F.R. 12.212or48C.F.R. 227.7202-1through227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
321
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus
The Monotype Corporation plc
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Antique Olive
Apple-Chancery
Arial
Apple Computer, Inc.
The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago
Clarendon
Eurostile
Geneva
Apple Computer, Inc.
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Nebiolo
Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans
Helvetica
Hoefler
The Monotype Corporation plc
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman
ITC Mona Lisa
ITC Zapf Chancery
Joanna
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
The Monotype Corporation plc
Arthur Baker
Marigold
Monaco
Apple Computer, Inc.
New York
Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford
Arthur Baker
Palatino
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
322
Taffy
Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman
Univers
The Monotype Corporation plc
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing
Scanning
Copying
Ready
48 dBA
45 dBA
50 dBA
32 dBA
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
323
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient temperature
15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
-40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)
Shipping and storage temperature
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
324
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode
Printing
Copy
Description
Power consumption (Watts)
The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.
600 W
640 W
The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
Scan
The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.
65 W
40 W
7 W
Ready
The product is waiting for a print job.
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.
0.5 W
Off
The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned 0 W
off.
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
325
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):
30 minutes
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting
the Sleep ModeTimeout toa low value reduces energy consumption, but mayincrease theresponse timeof the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regionsexcept for EU countries and Switzerland N/A
Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland
3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to electromagnetic compatibility.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
326
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and
2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-
related products.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
327
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
328
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time itis sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
329
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
330
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy‑related products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
331
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005, FCC ID: IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Notice to users in the European Union
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
332
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign
of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT
EL
LI
BE
ES
LT
SE
BG
FI
CH
FR
LV
SK
CY
CZ
DE
IE
DK
IS
EE
IT
HR
MT
TR
HU
NL
UK
LU
SI
NO
PL
PT
RO
Česky
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
Deutsch
LexmarkInternational,Inc. erklærerherved, atdetteproduktoverholderdevæsentligekravogøvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English
Español
Eesti
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
333
Magyar
Íslenska
Italiano
Latviski
Lietuvių
Malti
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbijverklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat hettoestel ditproductinovereenstemmingismetdeessentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
334
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before youpresentthisproduct for warranty service, removeallprint cartridges, programs, data, andremovable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
335
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights(IPR) Disclosure ofCerticom Corp. atthe IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
336
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
337
Index
adjusting brightness
Adjusting color 256
adjusting copy quality 78
administrator settings
advanced duplex
Card Copy
card stock
loading 50
tips 58
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 256
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 256
Change [paper source] to [paper
checking an unresponsive
printer 270
checking status of parts and
supplies 212
checking the status of parts and
supplies 212
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
Numerics
250‑sheet tray
loading 45
550‑sheet tray
installing 33
loading 45
650‑sheet duo tray
installing 33
Symbols
advanced imaging
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 257
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 257
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 257
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 269
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 269
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 269
[x]-page jam, open front door
[20y.xx] 248
answering machine
applications
understanding 20
attaching cables 35
cleaning
clear all / reset button
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 257
[x]-page jam, open front door to
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[251.xx] 252
B
buttons, touch screen
using 16
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
collate
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin
[203.xx] 242
C
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 254
[x]‑page jam, open front door to
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]
[24y.xx] 250
color quality troubleshooting
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 303
prints on color transparencies
color quality, troubleshooting
Complex page, some data may not
confidential data
cables
Ethernet 35
USB 35
cancel button
canceling
canceling a copy job 81
canceling a print job
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 317
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 19
ADF
information on securing 209
confidential jobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
338
printing from a Macintosh
computer 70
Confidential Print menu 143
Configuration change, some held
configuration information
wireless network 40
configurations
printer 11
configuring
supply notifications, imaging
kit 237
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 237
control panel, printer
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 27
copies
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 77
photos 74
placing separator sheets between
copies 79
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 81
copy options
advanced duplex 83
collate 82
reducing 77
to a different size 75
using the ADF 73
copying different paper sizes 76
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 80
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 77
copying on letterhead 75
copying on transparencies 74
cover page setup
copies 82
create booklet 84
custom job 84
darkness 82
header/footer 84
overlay 84
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 237
supply notifications, waste toner
bottle 237
configuring supply notifications
from the Embedded Web
Server 237
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 105
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 42
using Push Button Configuration
method 42
using the Embedded Web
Server 43
create booklet
separator sheets 84
copy quality
adjusting 78
copy screen
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 304
partial document or photo
copies 306
poor copy quality 305
poor scanned image quality 315
scanner unit does not
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 109
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 115
creating custom name
custom job
conservation settings
custom name
configuring 54
Hibernate Timeout 202
custom paper type name
assigning 54
Custom Type [x]
creating custom name 53
customer support
Schedule Power Modes 203
conserving supplies 199
content
copying
adding an overlay message 81
creating shortcuts using the
different paper sizes 76
enlarging 77
content source
contacting 319
content type
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
339
embedded solutions information
erasing 207
accessing 19
administrator settings 236
checking the status of parts 212
checking the status of
supplies 212
copying settings to other
printers 238
creating a fax destination
shortcut 109
modifying confidential print
settings 70, 238
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
emission
encrypting the printer hard
disk 208
envelopes
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 39
Windows 39
Ethernet setup
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
exterior of the printer
cleaning 210
D
darkness
date and time, fax
setting 106
delayed send
developer unit
device and network settings
information
e‑mail
canceling 89
e‑mail alerts
paper jam 236
erasing 207
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
digital telephone service
directory list
printing 71
Disk full 62 258
Disk must be formatted for use in
display
display troubleshooting
display, printer control panel
distinctive ring service, fax
documents, printing
e‑mail function
e‑mail options
custom job 91
darkness 90
edge erase 91
message 89
original size 89
recipient(s) 89
resolution 90
environmental settings 199
subject 89
transmission log 91
e‑mail screen
Hibernate Timeout 202
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 85
Schedule Power Modes 203
erasing hard disk memory 208
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 258
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 258
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 38
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 39
e‑mail, sending
e‑mailing
duplexing 77
adding message line 88
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
E
edge erase
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
340
cannot send or receive a fax 307
received fax has poor print
quality 312
FTP options
FTP address 119
FTP screen
faxing
options 120
blocking junk faxes 111
configuring the printer to observe
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
distinctive ring service 105
forwarding faxes 112
holding faxes 111
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 108
file name
finding more information about the
printer 9
flash drive
flash drives
font sample list
printing 71
footer
F
G
factory defaults
restoring 238
fax
sending 107
sending using the printer control
panel 106
green settings
Hibernate Timeout 202
fax and e‑mail functions
Schedule Power Modes 203
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 311
fax log
viewing 110
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 160
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 168
fax options
darkness 112
edge erase 114
page setup 113
resolution 113
scan preview 114
transmission log 114
fax screen
options 113
fax setup
H
header
inserting 80
header/footer
printing from a Macintosh
computer 70
Hibernate Mode
using 202
Hibernate Timeout
setting 202
holding faxes 111
home button
home screen
customizing 19
hiding icons 19
home screen applications
configuring 20
finding information 20
home screen buttons
understanding 14
inserting 80
Forms and Favorites
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
FTP options 119
FTP address, scanning to
using the printer control
panel 116
digital telephone service 100
standard telephone line
connection 94
VoIP 99
I
fax troubleshooting
can receive but not send
faxes 310
can send but not receive
faxes 310
icons on the home screen
hiding 19
showing 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
341
imaging kit
replacing 219
imaging kits
ordering 214
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
locations 241
messages 241
jams, clearing
in automatic document feeder top
cover 254
in fuser area 245
in manual feeder 252
in standard bin 242
Tray 1 250
Tray 2 250
Job Accounting menu 190
transparencies 50
loading letterhead
M
maintenance kit
ordering 214
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 262
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 262
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 262
making copies using paper from
manual feeder
loading 48
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 66
memory
memory card 26
indicator light
individual settings information
erasing 207
using the Embedded Web
Server 93
K
keypad
Insert Tray [x] 259
L
installing options
installing printer on a network
installing printer software
installing printer software
(Windows) 36
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
labels, paper
tips 57
letterhead
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 260
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 260
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 260
Load [paper source] with [paper
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
loading
card stock 50
manual feeder 48
multipurpose feeder 50
installing 29
troubleshooting 273
Memory full [38] 262
menu settings
menu settings page
printing 43
menus
Active NIC 134
AppleTalk 139
Custom Names 132
Insufficient memory to collate job
Insufficient memory to support
Insufficient memory, some Held
Insufficient memory, some held
interior of the printer
cleaning 210
IP address of computer
finding 18
IP address, printer
finding 19
Finishing 185
HTML 196
Image 197
IPv6 138
J
jams
avoiding 240
locating doors and trays 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
342
Miscellaneous 143
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type],
erasing 207
Not enough free space in flash
number of remaining pages
estimate 212
paper
Paper Size/Type 124
Paper Weight 129
PDF 192
PostScript 192
Quality 187
Reports 133
Setup 184
Standard USB 140
Substitute Size 127
Supplies 123
TCP/IP 137
Universal Setup 133
Utilities 191
Wireless 138
XPS 192
characteristics 58
different sizes, copying 76
letterhead 60
preprinted forms 60
saving 80
selecting 59
storing 60
unacceptable 59
Universal size setting 45
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 275
O
optional card
paper jams
avoiding 240
installing 31
options
paper jams, clearing
[x]-page jam, open front door
[20y.xx] 248
[x]-page jam, open front door to
[x]‑page jam, open front door to
clear duplex [23y.xx] 249
in automatic document feeder top
cover 254
firmware cards 26
memory card 29
options, copy screen
edge erase 83
scale 82
in fuser area 245
in manual feeder 252
in standard bin 242
Tray 1 250
Tray 2 250
paper saver
paper size
setting 45
Paper Size/Type menu 124
paper sizes
paper type
setting 45
paper types
paper weights
parts
checking, on the printer control
panel 212
options, touch‑screen
message
copy 82, 83
Miscellaneous menu 143
Multi Send
multipurpose feeder
loading 50
MyShortcut
fax 113
FTP 120
ordering
original size
output file type
changing 88
about 22
N
Network [x] software error
overlay
Network Reports menu 136
network settings
network setup page
printing 44
P
page setup
Networking Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
343
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 212
using genuine Lexmark 213
PCL Emul menu 193
Personal Identification Number
method
using 42
photos
copying 74
uneven print density 299
vertical voids appear on
prints 299
printer messages
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 257
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 257
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 257
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 269
Print Settings menu 182
print troubleshooting
jammed pages are not
reprinted 274
placing separator sheets between
copies 79
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 279
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 269
preparing to set up the printer on
print job
canceling, from computer 71
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 211
replacing a developer unit 228
replacing imaging kit 219
replacing the waste toner
bottle 215
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 291
horizontal voids appear on
prints 285
print is too light 290
printer is printing solid black
pages 292
shadow images appear on
prints 293
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[251.xx] 252
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
print job takes longer than
expected 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
printer
configurations 11
models 11
shipping 235
printer control panel
factory defaults, restoring 238
Sleep button light 16
using 14
printer control panel, virtual
display
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin
[203.xx] 242
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 254
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]
[24y.xx] 250
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 256
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 256
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 256
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 257
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 257
Configuration change, some held
Disk full 62 258
using the Embedded Web
Server 236
streaked horizontal lines appear
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 296
toner fog or background shading
toner rubs off 298
printer hard disk
encrypting 208
wiping 208
printer hard disk memory
erasing 208
printer information
printer IP address
finding 19
Disk must be formatted for use in
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 258
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 258
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 258
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
transparency print quality is
poor 299
Insert Tray [x] 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
344
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
Insufficient memory to collate job
Insufficient memory to support
Insufficient memory, some Held
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 260
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 260
Replace [color] cartridge, 0
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 264
Replace [color] cartridge, printer
region mismatch [42.xy] 264
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 264
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 265
Replace defective [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 265
Standard USB port disabled
Supply needed to complete
job 268
Too many flash options installed
Unformatted flash detected
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 258
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 269
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 272
Replace defective [type] imaging
kit [31.xy] 265
Replace jammed originals if
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 260
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 261
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 261
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 262
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 262
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 266
Replace missing [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 266
Replace missing [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 266
Replace missing or unresponsive
[type] imaging kit [31.xy] 263
Replace missing waste toner
Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge [32.xy] 266
Replace unsupported [type]
imaging kit [32.xy] 266
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 266
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 267
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 267
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 267
Scanner jam, remove all originals
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 267
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
restored 267
memory card 273
printer problems, solving basic 270
printer security
printer software, installing
(Windows) 36
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 71
directory list 71
font sample list 71
forms 65
menu settings page 43
printing a directory list 71
printing confidential and other held
jobs
printing from a flash drive 67
publications
Memory full [38] 262
Network [x] software error
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type],
Not enough free space in flash
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
[color] cartridge [31.xy] 263
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 264
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 264
Remove paper from standard
Standard network software error
Push Button Configuration method
using 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
345
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 266
Replace missing [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 266
Replace missing [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 266
Replace missing or unresponsive
Replace missing waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 266
Replace unsupported [color]
Replace unsupported [type]
imaging kit [32.xy] 266
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 266
transmission log 121
Scan Preview
scan preview
scan screen
Scan to Computer
Scan to Network
using 115
Q
R
recipient(s)
recycled paper
recycling
Lexmark packaging 204
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
[color] cartridge [31.xy] 263
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 264
remaining pages, number of
estimate 212
Remote Operator Panel
Remove defective disk [61] 265
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 264
Remove paper from standard
printing from a Macintosh
computer 70
repeating print defects 293
Replace [color] cartridge, 0
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 264
Replace [color] cartridge, printer
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 264
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 265
Replace defective [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 265
Replace defective [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 265
scan troubleshooting
reports
viewing 236
reserve print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 70
partial document or photo
scans 316
scanner unit does not
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 315
scanner
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 13
functions 12
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 267
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 267
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 267
scanner glass
cleaning 211
resolution
resolution, fax
changing 110
Restore held jobs? 267
restoring factory default
settings 238
S
Save As Shortcut
scan options
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 267
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 267
scanning
darkness 120
edge erase 121
original size 120
page setup 121
resolution 120
Scan Preview 121
Replace jammed originals if
to a computer using the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
346
using the Embedded Web
Server 117
scanning to a flash drive 119
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 115
using the printer control
panel 116
scanning to network
destinations 115
setting up fax
storing
paper 60
supplies 210
storing print jobs 69
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 295
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 296
subject and message information
supplies
checking, on the printer control
panel 212
digital telephone service 100
standard telephone line
connection 94
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 311
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 39
Schedule Power Modes
using 203
security
modifying confidential print
settings 70, 238
security settings information
erasing 207
shortcuts, creating
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 212
conserving 199
storing 210
using genuine Lexmark 213
FTP address 116
security Web page
selecting a location for the
printer 10
showing icons on the home
screen 19
sides (duplex)
sleep button
Sleep Mode
supplies, ordering
supply notifications
send as
configuring 237
sending a fax using the printer
adjusting 201
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
restored 267
Standard network software error
standard tray
loading 45
Standard USB menu 140
Standard USB port disabled
T
sending an e‑mail using the printer
telecommunication
the scanner does not respond 313
tips
sending fax
sending fax at a scheduled
time 108
separator sheets
Set Date and Time menu 145
setting
card stock 58
transparencies 56
toner cartridges
ordering 213
recycling 204
replacing 226
toner darkness
start button
statement of volatility 206
status of parts
checking 212
status of supplies
TCP/IP address 137
setting Hibernate Timeout 202
checking 212
adjusting 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
347
Too many flash options installed
touch screen
buttons 16
transmission log
can send but not receive
faxes 310
cannot send or receive a fax 307
received fax has poor print
quality 312
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 275
troubleshooting, print
jammed pages are not
reprinted 274
transparency print quality is
poor 299
uneven print density 299
vertical voids appear on
prints 299
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 272
memory card 273
troubleshooting, scan
partial document or photo
scans 316
transparencies
loading 50
trays
linking 52, 54
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 317
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 317
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 279
scanner unit does not
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 315
checking an unresponsive
printer 270
fax and e‑mail functions are not
solving basic printer
problems 270
the scanner does not respond 313
troubleshooting, color quality
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 303
prints on color transparencies
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 304
partial document or photo
copies 306
poor copy quality 305
poor scanned image quality 315
scanner unit does not
troubleshooting, display
troubleshooting, fax
can receive but not send
faxes 310
U
print job takes longer than
expected 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 291
horizontal voids appear on
prints 285
print is too light 290
printer is printing solid black
pages 292
shadow images appear on
prints 293
uneven print density 299
Unformatted flash detected
Universal Paper Size
setting 45
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 258
updating options in printer
driver 37
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 116
using shortcuts
using the address book
streaked horizontal lines appear
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 296
toner fog or background shading
toner rubs off 298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
348
V
printing from a Macintosh
computer 70
viewing
reports 236
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 236
voice mail
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
erasing 207
volatility
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 215
replacing 215
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 269
wiping the printer hard disk 208
wireless network
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 43
wireless setup wizard
using 41
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|